blob: 06c741292971d8bc8fcc3a574590c8d3b84a833d [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000031#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000035#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
42#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000052#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000053#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000054#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
57#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
Robert Loughercf176742016-12-15 16:17:53 +000058#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000060#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000061#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000062#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
63#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000064#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000067#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000068#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000069#include <cassert>
70#include <climits>
71#include <cstddef>
72#include <cstdint>
73#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000074#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000075#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000076#include <utility>
77#include <vector>
78
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000079using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000080using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000081
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000082#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
83
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000084// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
85// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
86// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
87// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000088static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
89 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
90 cl::desc(
91 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
92
93static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
94 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
95 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000096
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000097static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000098 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
99 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000100
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000101static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
102 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000104
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
108 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
109 "predicated store"));
110
111static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
112 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
113 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
114 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
115
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000116static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
117 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
118 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
119 "executed"));
120
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000121static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
122 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
123 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
124 "speculatively executed instructions"));
125
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000126STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000127STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
128 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
129STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
130 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
131STATISTIC(
132 NumLookupTablesHoles,
133 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000134STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000135STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
136 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000137STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000140
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000141// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
142// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
143// cases composing the case group.
144typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000145 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
147// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
148// switch for that PHI.
149typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
152struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
153 ConstantInt *Value;
154 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000157 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
158
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000159 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
160 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
161 return Value < RHS.Value;
162 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
165};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000166
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000167class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000168 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000169 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000170 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000171 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000172 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000173 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000174 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
175 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000176 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000177 BasicBlock *Pred,
178 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000179 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
180 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000182 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000183 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000184 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
185 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000186 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000187 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000188 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000189 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000190 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
191 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000193public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000194 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000195 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000196 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000197 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000198 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000199
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000200 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
201};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000202
203} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000205/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000206/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000207static bool
208SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000209 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000210 if (SI1 == SI2)
211 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000213 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
214 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
215 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
216 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
217 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000218
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000219 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
220 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000221 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
222 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
223 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000224 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
225 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000226 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
227 if (FailBlocks)
228 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
229 Fail = true;
230 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000231 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000232
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000233 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000234}
235
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000236/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
237/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
238/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000239static bool
240isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
241 Instruction *Cond,
242 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
243 if (SI1 == SI2)
244 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000245 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
246
247 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
250 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
251 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
252 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000253 if (!Ci2)
254 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000255 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
256 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
257 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
258 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
259 return false;
260
261 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
262 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000263 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000264 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
265 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
266 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000267 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
268 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000269 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000270 return false;
271 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
272 }
273 return true;
274}
275
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000276/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
277/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
278/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
279/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000280static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
281 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000282 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
283 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000284
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000285 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000286 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000287 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000288}
289
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000290/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
291/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
292/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000293/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000294static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000295 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000296 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000297 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000298 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000299}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000300
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000301/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
302/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000303/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
304/// which works well enough for us.
305///
306/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000307/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
308/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
309/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
310/// set and true is returned.
311///
312/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
313/// Select whose cost is 2.
314///
315/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
316/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
317/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000318static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000320 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
322 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000323 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
324 // so limit the recursion depth.
325 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
326 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
327 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
328 return false;
329
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000330 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000331 if (!I) {
332 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
333 // can be executed unconditionally.
334 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
335 if (C->canTrap())
336 return false;
337 return true;
338 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000340
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000341 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000342 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000343 if (PBB == BB)
344 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000345
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
347 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000348 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
349 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000350 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000351 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000352
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000353 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
354 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000355 if (!AggressiveInsts)
356 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000357
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000358 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
360 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000361
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000362 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
363 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
364 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000369
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000370 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
371 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
372 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
373 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
374 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
375 // enabled further IR optimizations.
376 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
377 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000378 return false;
379
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000380 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
381 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382
383 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
384 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000385 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000386 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
387 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000388 return false;
389 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
390 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000391 return true;
392}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000393
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000394/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000395/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000396static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000397 // Normal constant int.
398 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000399 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000400 return CI;
401
402 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
403 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000404 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000405
406 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
407 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
408 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
409
410 // IntToPtr const int.
411 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
412 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
413 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
414 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
415 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
416 return CI;
417 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000418 return cast<ConstantInt>(
419 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000420 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000421 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000422}
423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000425
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000426/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
427/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
428/// structure.
429/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
430/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
431/// representing the different cases for the switch.
432/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
433/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
434/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
435/// fail.
436struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000437 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000438 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
439 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
440 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
441 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000442
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000443 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000444 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
445 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
446 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000447 }
448
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000450 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000452 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
456 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
457 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000458 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
459 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460 CompValue = NewVal;
461 return (CompValue != nullptr);
462 }
463
464 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
465 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
466 /// match depending on isEQ).
467 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
468 /// against is placed in CompValue.
469 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
470 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000471 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000472 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
473 ICmpInst *ICI;
474 ConstantInt *C;
475 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000476 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000477 return false;
478 }
479
480 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000481 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482
483 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000484 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000485 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000486 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000487
488 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
489 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
490
491 /*
492 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
493 x : BITVECTOR(64);
494 y : BITVECTOR(64);
495 z : BITVECTOR(64);
496 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
497 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
498 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
499 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000500 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
501 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
502 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000503 */
504
505 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
506 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
507 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
508 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
509 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
510 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
511 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
512
513 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
514 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
515 //
516 // mask = (1 << z)
517 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
518 //
519 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
520 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
521
522 // Pattern match a special case:
523 /*
524 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
525 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
526 );
527 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000528 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000529 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
530 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000531 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000533 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000534 return false;
535
536 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000537 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000538 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
539 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000540 UsedICmps++;
541 return true;
542 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000543 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000545 // Pattern match a special case:
546 /*
547 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
548 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
549 );
550 */
551 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
552 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
553 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
554 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
555 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
556 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
557 return false;
558
559 Vals.push_back(C);
560 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
561 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
562 UsedICmps++;
563 return true;
564 }
565 }
566
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000567 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000568 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000569 return false;
570
571 UsedICmps++;
572 Vals.push_back(C);
573 return ICI->getOperand(0);
574 }
575
576 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000577 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
578 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000579
580 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
581 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
582 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000583 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
584 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000585 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
586 }
587
588 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
589 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
590 // x != 0 && x != 1.
591 if (!isEQ)
592 Span = Span.inverse();
593
594 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
595 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
596 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000597 }
598
599 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000600 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 return false;
602
603 // Add all values from the range to the set
604 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
605 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000606
607 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000608 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
610
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000611 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000612 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
613 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
614 /// vector.
615 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000616 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
618 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000619
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000620 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
621 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000622 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000623
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000625 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000626 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000627
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000628 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000630
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000631 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
632 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
633 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000634 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
635 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
636 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
637 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000638 continue;
639 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000640
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000641 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000642 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000643 // Match succeed, continue the loop
644 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000645 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000646
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
648 // comparison against the same value as the others.
649 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
650 if (!Extra) {
651 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000652 continue;
653 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000654 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
655 CompValue = nullptr;
656 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000657 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000658 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000659};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000660
661} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000662
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000663static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000664 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000665 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
666 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
667 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
668 if (BI->isConditional())
669 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000670 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
671 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000672 }
673
674 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000675 if (Cond)
676 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000677}
678
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000679/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000680/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000681Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000682 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000683 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
684 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
685 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000686 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
687 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
688 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000689 CV = SI->getCondition();
690 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000691 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000692 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000693 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000694 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000695 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000696
697 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000698 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000699 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
700 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000701 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000702 CV = Ptr;
703 }
704 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000705 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000706}
707
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000708/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000709/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000710BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
711 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000712 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000713 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000714 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
715 ++i)
716 Cases.push_back(
717 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000718 return SI->getDefaultDest();
719 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000720
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000721 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000722 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000723 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000724 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
725 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000726 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000727}
728
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000729/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000730/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000731static void
732EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
733 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000734 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000735}
736
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000737/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000738static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
739 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000740 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
741
742 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
743 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
744 std::swap(V1, V2);
745
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000746 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000748 if (V1->size() == 1) {
749 // Just scan V2.
750 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
751 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
752 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
753 return true;
754 }
755
756 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
757 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
758 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
759 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
760 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
761 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
762 return true;
763 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
764 ++i1;
765 else
766 ++i2;
767 }
768 return false;
769}
770
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000771/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
772/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
773/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
774/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
775/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000776bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
777 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000778 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 if (!PredVal)
780 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000781
782 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
783 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000784 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
785 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000786
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000787 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
788 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
789
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000791 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000792 BasicBlock *PredDef =
793 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
794 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000795
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000796 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000797 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000798 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000799 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
801 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
802 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
803 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
804 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
805 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
806 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000807 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000808 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000809
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000810 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
811 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
812 // uncond br.
813 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
814 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000815 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000816 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000817
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000818 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000819 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000820
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000821 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000822 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
823 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000824
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000825 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
826 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000828
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000829 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
830 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000831 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000832 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
833 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000834
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000835 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000836 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000837
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000838 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
839 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000840 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000841 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
842 if (HasWeight)
843 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
844 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000845 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000846 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
847 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000848 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
849 --i;
850 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000851 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000852 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000853 Weights.pop_back();
854 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000855 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
856 SI->removeCase(i);
857 }
858 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000859 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000860 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000861 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
862 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000863
864 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000865 return true;
866 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000867
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000868 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
869 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000870 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000872 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
873 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000874 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000875 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000876 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
877 }
878 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000879
880 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
881 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000882 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000883 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
884 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
885 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
886 break;
887 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000888
889 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000890 if (!TheRealDest)
891 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000892
893 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
894 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000895 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
896 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
897 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000899 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000900
901 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000902 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000903 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000904
905 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000906 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
907 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000908
909 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
910 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000911}
912
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000913namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000914
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000915/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
916/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
917/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
918struct ConstantIntOrdering {
919 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
920 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
921 }
922};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000923
924} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000925
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000926static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
927 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
928 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
929 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000930 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000931 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000932 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000933}
934
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000935static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000936 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000937 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000938 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000939 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
940
941 return false;
942}
943
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000944/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
945/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
946/// metadata.
947static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
948 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000949 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000950 assert(MD);
951 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000952 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000953 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000954 }
955
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000956 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
957 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
958 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000959 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000960 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
961 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
962 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
963 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000964 }
965}
966
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000967/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000968static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000969 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
970 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
971 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
972 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
973 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000974 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000975}
976
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000977/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
978/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000979/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
980/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000981bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
982 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000983 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000984 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000985 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
986 bool Changed = false;
987
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000988 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000989 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000990 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000991
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000992 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
993 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000994 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000996 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000997 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000998 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
999 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
1000 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
1001 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
1002 return false;
1003 }
1004 }
1005
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001006 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001007 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1009
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001010 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001011 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1012
1013 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1014 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1015 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001016 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001018 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1019 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001020 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1021 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1022
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001023 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001024 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001025 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001026 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1027 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1028 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001029 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1030 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1031 // successor's weights
1032 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001033
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001034 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001035 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001036 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001037 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001038 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1039 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1040 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001042
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001043 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1044 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1045 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001046 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001047 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1048 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1049 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1050 else {
1051 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1052 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001053
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001054 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1055 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001056 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1057 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001058 Weights.pop_back();
1059 }
1060
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001061 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001062 --i;
1063 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001064 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001065
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001066 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001067 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1068 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1069 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1070 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1071 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001072
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001073 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1074 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001075 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1076 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1077 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001080 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1081 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1082 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1083 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001084 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1085 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001086 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001087 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001088
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001089 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1090 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1091 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1092 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1093 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1094 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1095 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1096 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001097 } else {
1098 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1099 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1100 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001101 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1102 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001103 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1104 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1105 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001106
1107 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1109 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001110 Weights.pop_back();
1111 }
1112
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001113 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1114 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001115 --i;
1116 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001117 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001118
1119 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1120 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001121 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1122 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1123 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001124 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1125 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001126 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1127 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001128 PTIHandled.erase(
1129 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001130 }
1131
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001132 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1133 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001134 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001135 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001136 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1137 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001138 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001139 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001140 }
1141
1142 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1143 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1144 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001145 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1146 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001147
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001148 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001149 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001150 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001151 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001152 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001153 }
1154
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001155 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001156 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1157 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001158 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001159 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1160 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001161
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001162 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1163 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1164 FitWeights(Weights);
1165
1166 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1167
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001168 NewSI->setMetadata(
1169 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1170 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001171 }
1172
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001173 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001174
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001175 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1176 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1177 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001178 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001179 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1180 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001181 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001182 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001183 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001184 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1185 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001186 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001187 }
1188 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1189 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001190
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001191 Changed = true;
1192 }
1193 }
1194 return Changed;
1195}
1196
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001197// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1198// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1199// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001200static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1201 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001202 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001203 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001204 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001205 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1206 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1207 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001208 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001209 return false;
1210 }
1211 }
1212 }
1213 return true;
1214}
1215
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001216static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001218/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1219/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1220/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001221static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001222 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001223 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1224 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1225 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1226 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1227 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001228 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1229 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001230
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001231 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1232 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1233
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001234 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001235 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1237 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1238 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001244 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001245 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001246 return false;
1247
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001249
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001250 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001251 do {
1252 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1253 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1254 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1255 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001256
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001257 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1258 return Changed;
1259
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001260 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1261 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1262 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001263 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001264 if (!I2->use_empty())
1265 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001266 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001267 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1274 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1275 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1276 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001277 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001278
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001279 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1280 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1281 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1))
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001282 I1->setDebugLoc(
1283 DILocation::getMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc()));
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001284
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001285 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001286 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001287
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001288 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1289 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001290 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1291 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1292 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1293 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1294 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001295 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001296 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001297 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001298 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001299 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001300
1301 return true;
1302
1303HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001304 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1305 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001306 return Changed;
1307
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001308 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001309 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001310 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001311 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1312 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1313 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1314 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1315 continue;
1316
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001317 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1318 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1319 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1320 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001321 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001322
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001323 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001324 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001325 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001326 return Changed;
1327 }
1328 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001329
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001330 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001331 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001332 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001333 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001334 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1335 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001336 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001337 }
1338
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001339 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001340 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1341 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1342 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1343 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001344 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001345 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001346 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001347 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001348 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001349 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1350 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001351 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1352 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001353
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001354 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1355 // that determines the right value.
1356 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001357 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001358 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1359 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1360 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001361
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001362 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1363 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1364 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1365 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001366 }
1367 }
1368
1369 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001370 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1371 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001372
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001373 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001374 return true;
1375}
1376
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001377// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1378// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1379static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1380 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001381 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1382 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1383 return false;
1384
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001385 // Early exit.
1386 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1387 return true;
1388
1389 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1390 default:
1391 return true;
1392 case Instruction::Call:
1393 case Instruction::Invoke:
1394 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1395 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1396 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001397 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1398 return false;
1399
1400 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1401 // correctness.
1402 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1403 return false;
1404
1405 return true;
1406
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001407 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1408 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1409 return OpIdx != 2;
1410 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1411 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1412 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1413 return OpIdx == 0;
1414 case Instruction::Alloca:
1415 return false;
1416 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1417 if (OpIdx == 0)
1418 return true;
1419 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001420 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001421 }
1422}
1423
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001424// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1425// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1426// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1427// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1428// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1429static bool canSinkInstructions(
1430 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1431 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001432 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1433 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1434 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1435 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1436 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1437 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1438 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1439 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001440
1441 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1442 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1443 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1444 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1445 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1446 return false;
1447
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001448 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1449 // have no uses.
1450 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1451 return false;
1452 }
1453
1454 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1455 for (auto *I : Insts)
1456 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1457 return false;
1458
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001459 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1460 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1461 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1462 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001463 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1464 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001465 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1466 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001467 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001468 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001469 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001470 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1471 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001472 }))
1473 return false;
1474 }
1475
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001476 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1477 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1478 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1479 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001480
1481 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1482 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1483 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1484 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1485 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1486 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1487 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1488 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1489 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1490 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1491 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1492 }))
1493 return false;
1494 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1495 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1496 }))
1497 return false;
1498
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001499 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001500 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1501 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001502 };
1503 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1504 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1505 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1506 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001507 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1508 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001509 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1510 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001511 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001512 for (auto *I : Insts)
1513 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001514 }
1515 }
1516 return true;
1517}
1518
1519// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1520// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1521// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001522static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001523 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1524
1525 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1526 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1527 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001528 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1529 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1530 do {
1531 I = I->getPrevNode();
1532 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1533 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1534 Insts.push_back(I);
1535 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001536
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001537 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1538 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1539 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1540 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001541 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001542 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1543 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1544 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1545 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1546 return U == PNUse;
1547 }))
1548 return false;
1549 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001550
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001551 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1552 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001553 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1554 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1555 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1556 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1557 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1558 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1559 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1560 // small mess we may make.
1561 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1562 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1563 });
1564 if (!NeedPHI) {
1565 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1566 continue;
1567 }
1568
1569 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1570 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1571 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1572 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1573 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1574 for (auto *I : Insts)
1575 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1576 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1577 }
1578
1579 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1580 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1581 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1582 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1583 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1584
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001585 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations of
1586 // all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location of the
1587 // "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the loop below.
Robert Lougher6717a6f2017-01-12 18:33:49 +00001588 const DILocation *Loc = I0->getDebugLoc();
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001589
1590 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001591 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001592 if (I != I0) {
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001593 Loc = DILocation::getMergedLocation(Loc, I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001594 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001595 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1596 }
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001597 if (!isa<CallInst>(I0))
1598 I0->setDebugLoc(Loc);
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001599
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001600 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1601 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1602 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1603 // instruction and nuke it.
1604 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1605 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1606 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1607 PN->eraseFromParent();
1608 }
1609
1610 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1611 for (auto *I : Insts)
1612 if (I != I0)
1613 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001614
1615 return true;
1616}
1617
1618namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001619
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001620 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1621 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1622 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1623 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1624 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1625 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1626 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1627 // ...
1628 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1629 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1630 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1631 bool Fail;
1632 public:
1633 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1634 Blocks(Blocks) {
1635 reset();
1636 }
1637
1638 void reset() {
1639 Fail = false;
1640 Insts.clear();
1641 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001642 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1643 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1644 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1645 if (!Inst) {
1646 // Block wasn't big enough.
1647 Fail = true;
1648 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001649 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001650 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001651 }
1652 }
1653
1654 bool isValid() const {
1655 return !Fail;
1656 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001657
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 void operator -- () {
1659 if (Fail)
1660 return;
1661 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001662 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1663 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001664 // Already at beginning of block.
1665 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001666 Fail = true;
1667 return;
1668 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001669 }
1670 }
1671
1672 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1673 return Insts;
1674 }
1675 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001676
1677} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001678
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001679/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001680/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1681/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1682/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1683static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1684 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001685 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1686
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001687 // We support two situations:
1688 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1689 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1690 //
1691 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1692 // else-if patterns;
1693 //
1694 // if (a) f(1);
1695 // else if (b) f(2);
1696 //
1697 // produces:
1698 //
1699 // [if]
1700 // / \
1701 // [f(1)] [if]
1702 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001703 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001704 // | [f(2)]|
1705 // \ | /
1706 // [ end ]
1707 //
1708 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1709 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1710 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1711 //
1712 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1713 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1714 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1715 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1716 //
1717 // [if]
1718 // / \
1719 // [x(1)] [if]
1720 // | | \
1721 // | | \
1722 // | [x(2)] |
1723 // \ / |
1724 // [sink.split] |
1725 // \ /
1726 // [ end ]
1727 //
1728 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1729 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1730 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1731 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1732 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1733 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1734 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1735 Cond = T;
1736 else
1737 return false;
1738 }
1739 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001740 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001741
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001742 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001743 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1744 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1745 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1746 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1747 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1748 // PHIOperands.
1749 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1750 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1751 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001752 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001753 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1754 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1755 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1756 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1757 ++ScanIdx;
1758 --LRI;
1759 }
1760
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001761 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001762 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1763 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1764 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1765 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1766 ++NumPHIdValues;
1767 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1768 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1769 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1770 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001771
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001772 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1773 };
1774
1775 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001776 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1777 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1778 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1779 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1780 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1781 LRI.reset();
1782 unsigned Idx = 0;
1783 bool Profitable = false;
1784 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1785 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1786 Profitable = true;
1787 break;
1788 }
1789 --LRI;
1790 ++Idx;
1791 }
1792 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001793 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001794
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001795 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1796 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1797 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1798 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1799 ".sink.split"))
1800 // Edges couldn't be split.
1801 return false;
1802 Changed = true;
1803 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001804
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001805 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1806 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1807 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1808 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1809 // per sunk instruction).
1810 //
1811 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1812 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1813 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1814 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1815 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1816 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1817 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1818 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001819 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001820 << "\n");
1821
1822 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1823 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001824 LRI.reset();
1825 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001826 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001828 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001829 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001830
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001831 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001832 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001833 NumSinkCommons++;
1834 Changed = true;
1835 }
1836 return Changed;
1837}
1838
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001839/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1840/// conditional block.
1841///
1842/// We are looking for code like the following:
1843/// BrBB:
1844/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1845/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1846/// ... // function).
1847/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1848/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1849/// ThenBB:
1850/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1851/// br label EndBB
1852/// EndBB:
1853/// ...
1854/// We are going to transform this into:
1855/// BrBB:
1856/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1857/// ... //
1858/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1859/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1860/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1861/// ...
1862///
1863/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1864/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001865static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1866 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001867 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1868 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001869 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001870
1871 // Volatile or atomic.
1872 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001873 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001874
1875 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1876
1877 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001878 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001879 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1880 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1881 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001882 // Skip debug info.
1883 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1884 continue;
1885 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001886
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001887 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001888 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001889 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001890
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001891 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1892 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1893 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1894 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1895 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001896 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001897 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001898 }
1899
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001900 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001901}
1902
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001903/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001904///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001905/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1906/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1907/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1908/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1909/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1910///
1911/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1912/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1913/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1914/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1915///
1916///
1917/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1918/// \code
1919/// BB:
1920/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1921/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1922/// ThenBB:
1923/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001924/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001925/// EndBB:
1926/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1927/// ...
1928/// \endcode
1929///
1930/// Into this IR:
1931/// \code
1932/// BB:
1933/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1934/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1935/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1936/// ...
1937/// \endcode
1938///
1939/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001940static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001941 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001942 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1943 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1944 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1945 return false;
1946
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001947 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1948 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1949
1950 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1951 // to swap the select operands later.
1952 bool Invert = false;
1953 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1954 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1955 Invert = true;
1956 }
1957 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1958
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001959 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1960 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1961 // - They are defined in BB, and
1962 // - They have no side effects, and
1963 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1964 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1965
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001966 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001967 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1968 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001969 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001970 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001971 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001972 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001973 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001974 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1975 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001976
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001977 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001978 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001979 ++SpeculationCost;
1980 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001981 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001982
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001984 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1985 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1986 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001987 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001988 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001989 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1990 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001991 return false;
1992
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001993 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1994 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1995 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1996
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001997 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001998 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001999 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002000 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002001 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002002 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002003 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2004
2005 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002006 }
2007 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002008
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002009 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
2010 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2011 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002012 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2013 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2014 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002015 I != E; ++I)
2016 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002017 ++SpeculationCost;
2018 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002019 return false;
2020 }
2021
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002022 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2023 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002024 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002025 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002026 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2027 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002028
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002029 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002030 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002031 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002032 continue;
2033
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002034 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2035 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2036 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2037 return false;
2038
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002039 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002040 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2041 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2042 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002043 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2044
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002045 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2046 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002047 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002048 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2049 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002050 unsigned MaxCost =
2051 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002052 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002053 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002054
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002055 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2056 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2057 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002058 // constant expression.
2059 ++SpeculationCost;
2060 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002061 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002062 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002063
2064 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2065 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002066 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002067 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002068
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002069 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002070 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002071
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002072 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2073 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002074 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002075 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2076 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2077 if (Invert)
2078 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002079 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2080 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002081 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00002082 SpeculatedStore->setDebugLoc(
2083 DILocation::getMergedLocation(
2084 BI->getDebugLoc(), SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc()));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002085 }
2086
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002087 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2088 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002089 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002090 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2091
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002092 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002093 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2094 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002095
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002096 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002097 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002098 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2099 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2100 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2101 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2102 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2103 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2104
2105 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2106 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2107 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002108
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002109 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002110 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2111 // destinations were inverted.
2112 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002113 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002114 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002115 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2116 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002117 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2118 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002119 }
2120
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002121 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002122 return true;
2123}
2124
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002125/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002126static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2127 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002128 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002129
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002130 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002131 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2132 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002133 if (Size > 10)
2134 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002135 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002136
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002137 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002138 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002139 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2140 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2142 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002143 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002145 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2146 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002147
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002148 return true;
2149}
2150
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002151/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2152/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2153/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002154static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2155 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002156 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2157 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002158 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2159 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002160 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2161 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002162
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002163 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2164 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002165 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002166 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002167 }
2168
2169 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002170 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2171 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002172
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002173 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002174 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002175 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2176 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2177 }))
2178 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002179
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002180 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2181 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002182 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002183 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002184 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2185 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002186
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2188 // branch to RealDest.
2189 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2190 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002191
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002192 if (RealDest == BB)
2193 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002194 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002195 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2196 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002197
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002198 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2199 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2200 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2201 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002202 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2203 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2204 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002205 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002206
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002207 // Update PHI nodes.
2208 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002209
2210 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2211 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2212 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2213 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002214 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002215 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2216 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2217 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2218 continue;
2219 }
2220 // Clone the instruction.
2221 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002222 if (BBI->hasName())
2223 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002224
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002225 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002226 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2227 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2229 *i = PI->second;
2230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002231
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002232 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002233 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002234 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2235 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2236 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2237 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2238 N = nullptr;
2239 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002240 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002242 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002243 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002244 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2245 if (N)
2246 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002247
2248 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2249 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2250 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2251 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002252 }
2253
2254 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2255 // to EdgeBB instead.
2256 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2257 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2258 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2259 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2260 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2261 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002262
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002263 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002264 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002265 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002266
2267 return false;
2268}
2269
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002270/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2271/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002272static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2273 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002274 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2275 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2276 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2277 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2278 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2279 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002280 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2281 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2282 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002283 if (!IfCond ||
2284 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2285 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2286 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002287
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002288 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2289 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2290 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2291 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2292 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2293 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2294 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2295 if (NumPhis > 2)
2296 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002297
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002298 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2299 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2300 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002301 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002302 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2303 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002304 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2305 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002306
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002307 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2308 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002309 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002310 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002311 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002312 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002313 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002315 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002316 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002317 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002318 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002319 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002320 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002321
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002322 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002323 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2324 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002325 if (!PN)
2326 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002328 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2329 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2330 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2331 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2332 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2333 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2334 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002335
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002336 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2337 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2338 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2339 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002340 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002341 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2342 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2343 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002344 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002345 } else {
2346 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002347 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2348 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002349 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002350 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002351 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2352 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002353 return false;
2354 }
2355 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002356
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002357 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002358 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002359 } else {
2360 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002361 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2362 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002363 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002364 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002365 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2366 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002367 return false;
2368 }
2369 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002370
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002371 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002372 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002373
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002374 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2375 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002376 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002377 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002378
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002379 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2380 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002381 if (IfBlock1) {
2382 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2383 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002384 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002385 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002386 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002387 }
2388 if (IfBlock2) {
2389 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2390 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002391 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002392 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002393 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002394 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002395
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002396 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2397 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002398 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002399 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002400
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002401 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2402 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2403 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002404 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002405 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002406
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002407 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2408 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2409 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2410 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002411 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2412 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002413 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002414 return true;
2415}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002416
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002417/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2418/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002419/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002421 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002422 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2423 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2424 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2425 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2426 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002427
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2429 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2430 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002431 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002432 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002433 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002434 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002435
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002436 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002437 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2438 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2439 // branch into a return.
2440 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2441 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2442 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002443 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002444 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002445 return true;
2446 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002447
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002448 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2449 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2450 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2451 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002452
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002453 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2454 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2455 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2456 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2457 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2458 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2459 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002460
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002461 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2462 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2463 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2464 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2465 // safe.
2466 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2467 if (TCV->canTrap())
2468 return false;
2469 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2470 if (FCV->canTrap())
2471 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002472
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002473 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2474 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2475 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2476 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002477
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002478 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2479 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002480 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002481 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002482 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2483 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2484 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2485 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002486 TrueValue =
2487 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002488 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002489 }
2490
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002491 Value *RI =
2492 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002493
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002494 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002495
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002496 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002497 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002498 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002499
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002500 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2501
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002502 return true;
2503}
2504
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002505/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002506/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002507static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002508 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2509 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002510 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2511 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002512 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2513 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2514 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2515 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2516 return true;
2517 }
2518 }
2519 return false;
2520}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002521
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002522/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2523/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2524/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2525static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2526 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2527 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2528 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2529 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2530 bool PredHasWeights =
2531 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2532 bool SuccHasWeights =
2533 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2534 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2535 if (!PredHasWeights)
2536 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2537 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2538 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2539 return true;
2540 } else {
2541 return false;
2542 }
2543}
2544
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002545/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2546/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2547/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002548bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002549 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002550
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002551 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002552 if (BI->isConditional())
2553 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2554 else {
2555 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2556 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2557 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2558 // predecessor.
2559 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2560 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2561 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2562 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2563 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002564 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002565 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002566 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2567 Cond = Curr;
2568 break;
2569 }
2570 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2571 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2572 return false;
2573 }
2574 }
2575
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002576 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002577 return false;
2578 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002579
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002580 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2581 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002582 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002583
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002584 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002585 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002586
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002587 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002588 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2589 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002590
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002591 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002592 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002593
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002594 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2595 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2596 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2597 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2598 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2599 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002600 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002601 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2602 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2603 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002604 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002605 return false;
2606 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2607 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2608 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2609 return false;
2610 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2611 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2612 // and Cond.
2613 ++NumBonusInsts;
2614 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2615 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2616 return false;
2617 }
2618
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002619 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2620 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2621 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2622 if (CE->canTrap())
2623 return false;
2624 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2625 if (CE->canTrap())
2626 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002627
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002628 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002629 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002630 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002631 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2632 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002633
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002634 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2635 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002636 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002637
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002638 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2639 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2640 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002641 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002642 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002643 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002644 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2645 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002646 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002647
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002648 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002649 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002650 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002651
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002652 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002653 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002654 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002655 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002656 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002657 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2658 Opc = Instruction::And;
2659 InvertPredCond = true;
2660 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2661 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2662 InvertPredCond = true;
2663 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002664 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002665 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002666 } else {
2667 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2668 continue;
2669 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002670
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002671 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002672 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002673
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002674 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2675 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002676 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002677
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002678 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2679 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2680 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2681 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002682 NewCond =
2683 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002684 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002685
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002686 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002687 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002688 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002689
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002690 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002691 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002692 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2693 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2694 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002695 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002696 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002697 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002698 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2699 continue;
2700 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2701 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002702 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002703 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002704
2705 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2706 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2707 // only given the branch precondition.
2708 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2709 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002710 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002711
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002712 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2713 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002714 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002715 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002716
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002717 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2718 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002719 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002720 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002721 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002722 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002723 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002724 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002725
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002726 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002727 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2728 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002729 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2730
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002731 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002732 bool HasWeights =
2733 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2734 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002735 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2736
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002737 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002738 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002739 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2740 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002741 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002742 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002743 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002744 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2745 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2746 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002747 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2748 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2749 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002750 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002751 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2752 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2753 }
2754 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002755 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002756 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2757 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002758 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002759 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002760 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2761 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2762 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2763 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002764 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2765 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002766 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2767 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2768 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002769 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2770 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2771 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2772
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002773 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2774 NewWeights.end());
2775 PBI->setMetadata(
2776 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2777 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002778 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002779 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002780 } else {
2781 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2782 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002783 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002784 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002785 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002786 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002787 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2788 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2789 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2790 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002791 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2792 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2793 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2794 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002795 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002796 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2797 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002798 } else {
2799 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2800 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2801 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002802 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2803 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002804 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002805 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2806 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2807 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2808 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002809 }
2810 }
2811 // Update PHI Node.
2812 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2813 MergedCond);
2814 }
2815 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2816 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2817 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2818 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002819 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002820
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002821 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2822 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2823 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2824 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2825
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002826 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2827 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2828
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002829 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002830 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2831 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2832 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002833
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002834 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002835 }
2836 return false;
2837}
2838
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002839// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2840// nullptr.
2841static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2842 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2843 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2844 if (!BB)
2845 continue;
2846 for (auto &I : *BB)
2847 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2848 if (S)
2849 // Multiple stores seen.
2850 return nullptr;
2851 else
2852 S = SI;
2853 }
2854 }
2855 return S;
2856}
2857
2858static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2859 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2860 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2861 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2862 //
2863 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2864 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2865 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2866 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2867 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2868 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2869 // one.
2870 //
2871 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2872 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2873 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2874 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2875 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002876
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002877 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2878 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2879 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2880 if (!AlternativeV)
2881 break;
2882
2883 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2884 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2885 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2886 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2887 break;
2888 PHI = nullptr;
2889 }
2890 if (PHI)
2891 return PHI;
2892
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002893 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2894 if (!AlternativeV &&
2895 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2896 return V;
2897
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002898 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002899 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2900 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2901 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002902 PHI->addIncoming(
2903 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002904 return PHI;
2905}
2906
2907static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2908 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2909 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2910 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2911 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2912 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2913 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2914 };
2915
2916 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2917 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2918 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2919 if (!BB)
2920 return true;
2921 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2922 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2923 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002924 unsigned N = 0;
2925 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2926 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2927 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2928 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2929 ++N;
2930 // Free instructions.
2931 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2932 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2933 continue;
2934 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002935 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002936 }
2937 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002938 };
2939
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002940 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2941 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2942 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002943 return false;
2944
2945 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2946 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2947 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2948 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2949 // testing.
2950 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2951 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2952 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2953 return false;
2954
2955 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2956 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2957 return false;
2958
2959 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2960 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2961 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2962 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2963 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2964 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2965 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2966 //
2967 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2968 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2969 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2970 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2971 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2972 return false;
2973 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2974 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2975 return false;
2976 if (QTB)
2977 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2978 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2979 return false;
2980 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2981 I != E; ++I)
2982 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2983 return false;
2984
2985 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2986 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2987 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2988 ->getCondition();
2989 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2990 ->getCondition();
2991
2992 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2993 PStore->getParent());
2994 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2995 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2996
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002997 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2998
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002999 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3000 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3001
3002 if (InvertPCond)
3003 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3004 if (InvertQCond)
3005 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3006 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3007
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003008 auto *T =
3009 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003010 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3011 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3012 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3013 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3014 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3015 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
3016
3017 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3018 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003019
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003020 return true;
3021}
3022
3023static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
3024 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3025 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3026 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3027 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3028 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3029 // PBI and QBI.
3030 //
3031 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3032 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3033 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3034 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3035 //
3036 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3037 //
3038 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3039 // / \ | \
3040 // PTB PFB | PFB
3041 // \ / | /
3042 // QBI QBI
3043 // / \ | \
3044 // QTB QFB | QFB
3045 // \ / | /
3046 // PostBB PostBB
3047 //
3048 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3049 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3050 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003051 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003052 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3053 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3054 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3055 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3056 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3057
3058 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3059 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3060 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3061 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3062 InvertPCond = true;
3063 }
3064 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3065 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3066 InvertQCond = true;
3067 }
3068
3069 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3070 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3071 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3072 PTB = nullptr;
3073 if (QTB == PostBB)
3074 QTB = nullptr;
3075
3076 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3077 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3078 // predecessor.
3079 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003080 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003081 };
3082 if (!PostBB ||
3083 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3084 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3085 return false;
3086 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3087 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3088 return false;
3089 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3090 return false;
3091
3092 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3093 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003094 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003095 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3096 if (!BB)
3097 continue;
3098 for (auto &I : *BB)
3099 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3100 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3101 }
3102 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3103 if (!BB)
3104 continue;
3105 for (auto &I : *BB)
3106 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3107 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3108 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003109
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003110 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3111 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3112 // clear what it contains.
3113 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3114
3115 bool Changed = false;
3116 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3117 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3118 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3119 return Changed;
3120}
3121
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003122/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3123/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003124/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3125/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003126static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3127 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003128 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3129 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003130
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003131 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003132 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003133 // this conditional branch redundant.
3134 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3135 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3136 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3137 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3138 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3139 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3140 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003141 BI->setCondition(
3142 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3143 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003144 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003145
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003146 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3147 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3148 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3149 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003150 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003151 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3152 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3153 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003154 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3155 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3156 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003157 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003158 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003159 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3160 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003161 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3162 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003163 NewPN->addIncoming(
3164 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3165 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003166 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003167 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003168 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003169 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003170
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003171 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003172 return true;
3173 }
3174 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003175
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003176 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3177 if (CE->canTrap())
3178 return false;
3179
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003180 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3181 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3182 // merged store at the end.
3183 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3184 return true;
3185
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003186 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003187 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003188 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003189 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3190 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3191 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3192 ++BBI;
3193 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003194 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003195
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003196 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003197 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3198 PBIOp = 0;
3199 BIOp = 0;
3200 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3201 PBIOp = 0;
3202 BIOp = 1;
3203 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3204 PBIOp = 1;
3205 BIOp = 0;
3206 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3207 PBIOp = 1;
3208 BIOp = 1;
3209 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003210 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003211 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003213 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3214 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3215 // keep getting unwound.
3216 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3217 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003218
3219 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003220 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3221 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003222
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003223 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3224 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3225 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3226
3227 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003228 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003229 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3230 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003231 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3232 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003233
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003234 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3235 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3236 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3237 if (CE->canTrap())
3238 return false;
3239
3240 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3241 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3242 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3243 if (CE->canTrap())
3244 return false;
3245 }
3246
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003247 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003248 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003249
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003250 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003251 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003253 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3254 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3255 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3256 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3257 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3258 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3259 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3260 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3261 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3262 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003263 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3264 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003265 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3266 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003267 }
3268
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003269 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003270
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003271 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3272 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003274 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3275 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003276 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003277 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003278 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003279
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003280 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3281 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003282 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003283
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003284 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003285 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003286
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003287 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3288 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3289 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3290 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003291
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003292 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3293 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003294 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003295 bool HasWeights =
3296 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3297 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003298 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003299 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3300 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3301 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3302 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003303 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3304 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3305 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003306 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3307 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3308 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003309 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003310 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3311
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003312 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003313 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3314 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003315 }
3316
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003317 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3318 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003319 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003320
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003321 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3322 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3323 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3324 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003325 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003326 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3327 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3328 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3329 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3330 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3331 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3332 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003333 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3334 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003335 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003336 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3337 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3338 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3339 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003340 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003341 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3342 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3343 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3344 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3345 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3346 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3347 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3348 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3349
3350 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3351
3352 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3353 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3354 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3355 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003356 }
3357 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003358
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003359 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3360 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003361
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003362 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3363 // one fewer predecessor.
3364 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003365}
3366
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003367// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3368// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003369// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3370// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3371// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3372static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003373 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3374 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003375 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003376 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3377 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3378 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3379 // successor.
3380 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003381 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003382
3383 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003384 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003385 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3386 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003387 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003388 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003389 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003390 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003391 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3392 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003393 }
3394
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003395 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3396 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3397
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003398 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003399 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003400 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3401 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3402 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003403 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003404 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003405 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3406 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003407 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3408 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3409 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003410 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3411 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003412 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003413 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3414 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3415 // terminator must be unreachable.
3416 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3417 } else {
3418 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3419 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3420 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003421 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003423 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003424 else
3425 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003426 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003427 }
3428
3429 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3430 return true;
3431}
3432
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003433// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003434// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3435// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3436// unconditional otherwise.
3437static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3438 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3439 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3440 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3441 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3442 return false;
3443
3444 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3445 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003446 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3447 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003448
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003449 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3450 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3451 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3452 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3453 if (HasWeights) {
3454 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3455 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003456 TrueWeight =
3457 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3458 FalseWeight =
3459 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003460 }
3461 }
3462
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003463 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003464 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3465 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003466}
3467
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003468// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003469// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3470// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3471// with
3472// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3473static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3474 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3475 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3476 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3477 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3478 return false;
3479
3480 // Extract the actual blocks.
3481 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3482 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3483
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003484 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003485 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3486 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003487}
3488
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003489/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3490/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003491/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3492/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3493/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3494/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3495/// like:
3496///
3497/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3498/// DEFAULT:
3499/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3500/// br label %end
3501/// end:
3502/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003503///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003504/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3505/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003506static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003507 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003508 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3509 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003510 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003511
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003512 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3513 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003514 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3515 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003516
3517 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3518 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003519
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003520 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3521 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3522 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3523 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003524 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3525 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003526
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003527 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3528 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3529 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003530
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003531 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3532 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3533 // away.
3534 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3535 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3536 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3537 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003538
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003539 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003540 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003541 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3542 }
3543 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003544 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003545 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003546
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003547 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3548 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3549 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003550 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003551 Value *V;
3552 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3553 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3554 else
3555 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003556
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003557 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3558 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3559 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003560 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003561 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003562
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003563 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3564 // the block.
3565 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003566 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003567 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003568 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3569 return false;
3570
3571 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3572 // true in the PHI.
3573 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003574 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003575
3576 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3577 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3578
3579 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3580 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3581 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3582 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3583
3584 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3585 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003586 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3587 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003588 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3589 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3590 if (HasWeights) {
3591 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3592 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3593 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003594 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003595 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3596
3597 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003598 SI->setMetadata(
3599 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3600 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003601 }
3602 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003603 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003604
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003605 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003606 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3607 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3608 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003609 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3610 return true;
3611}
3612
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003613/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003614/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3615/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003616static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3617 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003618 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003619 if (!Cond)
3620 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003621
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003622 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3623 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3624 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003625
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003626 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003627 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3628 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003629 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003630 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3631 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3632 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003633
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003634 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003635 if (!CompVal)
3636 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003637
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003638 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3639 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3640 return false;
3641
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003642 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3643
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003644 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3645 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3646 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3647 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003648
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003649 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003650 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003651 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3652 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003653
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003654 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3655 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3656
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003657 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3658 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003659 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3660 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3661 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003662
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003663 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003664
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003665 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003666 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3667 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003668
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003669 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3670 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3671 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3672 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003673 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3674 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003675 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3676 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003677 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3678
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003679 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003680 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003681 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003682 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003683
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003684 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003685
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003686 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3687 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003688 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003689
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003690 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003691 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 BB = NewBB;
3693 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003694
3695 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003696 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3697 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003698 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3699 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003700 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003701
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003702 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003703 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003704
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003705 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3706 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3707 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003708
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003709 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3710 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3711 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003712 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003713 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3714 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003715 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003716 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3717 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003718
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003719 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3720 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003721
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003722 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003723 return true;
3724}
3725
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003726bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003727 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3728 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3729 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3730 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3731 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3732 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003733
3734 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003735}
3736
3737// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3738bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3739 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3740
3741 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3742 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3743 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003744 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003745 while (++I != E)
3746 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3747 return false;
3748
3749 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3750 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3751
3752 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003753 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3754 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003755 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3756 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3757
3758 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3759 // it has other dependents.
3760 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3761 continue;
3762
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003763 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003764 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3765 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3766 continue;
3767
3768 bool isTrivial = true;
3769
3770 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3771 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3772 while (++I != E)
3773 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3774 isTrivial = false;
3775 break;
3776 }
3777
3778 if (isTrivial)
3779 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3780 }
3781
3782 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003783 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3784 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003785
3786 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3787 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3788 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3789 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3790 // to remove them all.
3791 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3792 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3793
3794 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3795 PI != PE;) {
3796 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3797 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3798 }
3799
3800 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3801 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3802 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3803 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3804 // predecessors.
3805 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3806 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3807 }
3808
3809 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3810 if (pred_empty(BB))
3811 BB->eraseFromParent();
3812
3813 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3814}
3815
3816// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3817bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003818 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3819 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003820 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3821 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003822
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003823 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3824 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003825 while (++I != E)
3826 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3827 return false;
3828
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003829 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003830 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3831 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3832 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003833 }
3834
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003835 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3836 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003837 if (LoopHeaders)
3838 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003839 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003840}
3841
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003842static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003843 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3844 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3845 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3846 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3847 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3848 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3849 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3850 // simplified.
3851 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003852 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3853 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003854 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3855 return false;
3856
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003857 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3858 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3859 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3860 return false;
3861
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003862 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003863 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003864 while (++I != E) {
3865 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3866 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003867 return false;
3868
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003869 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3870 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3871 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3872 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3873 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3874 break;
3875 default:
3876 return false;
3877 }
3878 }
3879
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003880 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3881 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003882 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003883 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003884
3885 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3886 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3887 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3888 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3889 // are both EH pads).
3890 if (UnwindDest) {
3891 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3892 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003893 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003894 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003895 I != IE; ++I) {
3896 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003897
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003898 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003899 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003900 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003901 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3902 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3903 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3904 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3905 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3906 // pad being removed.
3907 //
3908 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3909 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3910 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3911 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3912 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3913 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3914
3915 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3916 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3917
3918 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3919 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3920 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3921 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003922 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003923 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003924 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3925 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3926 }
3927 } else {
3928 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3929 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3930 // predecessors with this value.
3931 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3932 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3933 }
3934 }
3935 }
3936
3937 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003938 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003939 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3940 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003941 I != IE;) {
3942 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3943 // being moved to another block.
3944 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3945 if (PN->use_empty())
3946 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3947 // when we erase BB below.
3948 continue;
3949
3950 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3951 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3952 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3953 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3954 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3955 if (pred != BB)
3956 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3957 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3958 }
3959 }
3960
3961 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3962 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3963 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003964 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003965 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003966 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003967 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003968 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003969 }
3970 }
3971
3972 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3973 BB->eraseFromParent();
3974 return true;
3975}
3976
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003977// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3978static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3979 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3980 // with.
3981 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3982 if (!UnwindDest)
3983 return false;
3984
3985 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3986 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3987 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3988 return false;
3989
3990 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3991 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3992 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3993 return false;
3994
3995 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3996 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3997 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3998 // funclet bundle operands.
3999 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4000 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4001 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4002 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4003 // destination.
4004 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4005 RI->eraseFromParent();
4006
4007 return true;
4008}
4009
4010bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004011 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4012 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4013 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4014 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4015 return false;
4016
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004017 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004018 return true;
4019
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004020 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004021 return true;
4022
4023 return false;
4024}
4025
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004026bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004027 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004028 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4029 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004030
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004031 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004032 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4033 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004034 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4035 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004036 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4037 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4038 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4039 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4040 else
4041 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4042 }
4043 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004044
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004045 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004046 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004047 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4048 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4049 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004050 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004051 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004053
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004054 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004055 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4057 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004058 if (LoopHeaders)
4059 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004060 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004061
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004062 return true;
4063 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004064
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004065 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4066 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4067 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4068 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4069 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004070
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004071 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4072 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4073 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004074 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 return true;
4076 }
4077 return false;
4078}
4079
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004080bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4081 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004082
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004083 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004084
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004085 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4086 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004087 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4088 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004089 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004090 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4091 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4092 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004093 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4094 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004095
4096 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004097 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004098 if (SI->isVolatile())
4099 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004100 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004101 if (LI->isVolatile())
4102 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004103 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004104 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4105 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004106 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004107 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4108 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004109 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4110 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4111 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4112 // default.
4113 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4114 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4115 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4116 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004117 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4118 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004119 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004120 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004121 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4122 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4123 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4124 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004125 }
4126
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004127 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4128 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4129 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004130 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004131 Changed = true;
4132 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004133
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004134 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4135 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004136 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4137 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004138
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004139 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004140 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4141 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004142 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004143 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004144 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4145 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4146 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4147 TI->eraseFromParent();
4148 Changed = true;
4149 }
4150 } else {
4151 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004152 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004153 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4154 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004155 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004156 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4157 Changed = true;
4158 }
4159 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004160 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004161 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4162 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004163 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004164 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4165 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004166 --i;
4167 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004168 Changed = true;
4169 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004170 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4171 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4172 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4173 Changed = true;
4174 }
4175 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4176 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4177 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4178 Changed = true;
4179 continue;
4180 }
4181
4182 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4183 E = CSI->handler_end();
4184 I != E; ++I) {
4185 if (*I == BB) {
4186 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4187 --I;
4188 --E;
4189 Changed = true;
4190 }
4191 }
4192 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4193 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4194 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4195 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4196 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4197 } else {
4198 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4199 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4200 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4201 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4202 }
4203 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4204 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4205 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4206 Changed = true;
4207 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004208 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004209 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4210 TI->eraseFromParent();
4211 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004212 }
4213 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004214
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004215 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004216 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004217 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4218 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004219 if (LoopHeaders)
4220 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004221 return true;
4222 }
4223
4224 return Changed;
4225}
4226
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004227static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4228 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4229
4230 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4231 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4232 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4233 return false;
4234 }
4235 return true;
4236}
4237
4238/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4239/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004240static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004241 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004242
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004243 bool HasDefault =
4244 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004245
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004246 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4247 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4248 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004249 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4250 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004251
4252 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4253 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004254 if (!DestA)
4255 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004256 if (Dest == DestA) {
4257 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4258 continue;
4259 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004260 if (!DestB)
4261 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004262 if (Dest == DestB) {
4263 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4264 continue;
4265 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004266 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004267 }
4268
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004269 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4270 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004271 assert(DestA != DestB);
4272 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4273 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4274 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4275
4276 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4277 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4278 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4279 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4280 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4281 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4282 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4283 OtherDest = DestB;
4284 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4285 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4286 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4287 OtherDest = DestA;
4288 } else
4289 return false;
4290
4291 // Start building the compare and branch.
4292
4293 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004294 Constant *NumCases =
4295 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004296
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004297 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4298 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004299 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4300
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004301 Value *Cmp;
4302 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004303 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004304 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4305 else
4306 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004307 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004308
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004309 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004310 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4311 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004312 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4313 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004314 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4315 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4316 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4317 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4318 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4319 else
4320 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4321 }
4322 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4323 TrueWeight /= 2;
4324 FalseWeight /= 2;
4325 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004326 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004327 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4328 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4329 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004330 }
4331 }
4332
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004333 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4334 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4335 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004336 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4337 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004338 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004339 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4340 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004341 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4342 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004343 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4344 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004345 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4346 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4347 }
4348
4349 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004350 SI->eraseFromParent();
4351
4352 return true;
4353}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004354
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004355/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004356/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004357static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4358 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004359 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004360 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004361 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004362 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004363
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004364 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4365 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4366 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004367 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004368 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4369
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004370 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004371 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004372 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004373 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4374 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4375 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004376 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004377 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004378 }
4379 }
4380
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004381 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4382 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004383 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4384 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004385 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004386 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4387 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4388 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004389 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004390 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004391 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004392 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004393 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004394 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4395 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004396 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4397 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004398 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4399 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4400 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4401 return true;
4402 }
4403
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004404 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4405 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4406 if (HasWeight) {
4407 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4408 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4409 }
4410
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004411 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004412 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4413 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004414 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004415 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004416 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004417 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004418 Weights.pop_back();
4419 }
4420
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004421 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004422 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004423 SI->removeCase(Case);
4424 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004425 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004426 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4427 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004428 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4429 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004430 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004431
4432 return !DeadCases.empty();
4433}
4434
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004435/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4436/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004437/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4438/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4439/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4440static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004441 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004442 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004443 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004444 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004445 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004446
4447 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4448 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004449 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004450
4451 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4452
4453 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4454 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4455 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4456 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4457
4458 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004459 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4460 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004461
4462 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4463 return PHI;
4464 }
4465
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004466 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004467}
4468
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004469/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4470/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4471/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004472/// Returns true if a change is made.
4473static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004474 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004475 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4476
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004477 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4478 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004479 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4480 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004481
4482 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004483 PHINode *PHI =
4484 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4485 if (!PHI)
4486 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004487
4488 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4489 }
4490
4491 bool Changed = false;
4492
4493 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004494 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4495 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004496 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004497 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004498
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004499 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4500 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004501
4502 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4503 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4504 Changed = true;
4505 }
4506
4507 return Changed;
4508}
4509
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004510/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004511/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004512static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004513 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4514 return false;
4515 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4516 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004517
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004518 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4519 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4520 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4521 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004522
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004523 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004524 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4525 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004526 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4527 return false;
4528 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004529
4530 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4531 return false;
4532
4533 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004534}
4535
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004536/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004537/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004538static Constant *
4539LookupConstant(Value *V,
4540 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004541 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4542 return C;
4543 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4544}
4545
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004546/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004547/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4548/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004549/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004550static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004551ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4552 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004553 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004554 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4555 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004556 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004557 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4558 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4559 if (A->isNullValue())
4560 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004561 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004562 }
4563
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004564 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4565 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4566 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4567 COps.push_back(A);
4568 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004569 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004570 }
4571
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004572 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004573 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4574 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004575 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004576
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004577 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004578}
4579
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004580/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004581/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004582/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004583/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004584static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004585GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004586 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004587 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004588 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004589 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4590 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4591
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004592 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4593 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004594 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004595 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4596 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4597 ++I) {
4598 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4599 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004600 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004601 return false;
4602 Pred = CaseDest;
4603 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4604 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4605 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4606 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004607 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004608 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004609
4610 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4611 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4612 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4613 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4614 User *User = Use.getUser();
4615 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4616 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4617 continue;
4618 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4619 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4620 continue;
4621 return false;
4622 }
4623
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004624 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004625 } else {
4626 break;
4627 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004628 }
4629
4630 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4631 if (!*CommonDest)
4632 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4633 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4634 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4635 return false;
4636
4637 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4638 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4639 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4640 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4641 if (Idx == -1)
4642 continue;
4643
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004644 Constant *ConstVal =
4645 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004646 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004647 return false;
4648
4649 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004650 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004651 return false;
4652
4653 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4654 }
4655
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004656 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004657}
4658
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004659// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4660// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004661static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004662 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4663 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004664 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4665 if (I.first == Result) {
4666 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4667 return;
4668 }
4669 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004670 UniqueResults.push_back(
4671 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004672}
4673
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004674// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004675// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4676// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4677// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004678static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4679 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4680 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4681 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004682 const DataLayout &DL,
4683 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004684 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4685 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4686
4687 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4688 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4689 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004690 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004691 return false;
4692
4693 // Only one value per case is permitted
4694 if (Results.size() > 1)
4695 return false;
4696 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4697
4698 // Check the PHI consistency.
4699 if (!PHI)
4700 PHI = Results[0].first;
4701 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4702 return false;
4703 }
4704 // Find the default result value.
4705 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4706 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4707 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004708 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004709 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4710 // is unreachable.
4711 DefaultResult =
4712 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4713 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004714 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004715 return false;
4716
4717 return true;
4718}
4719
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004720// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4721// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004722// Example:
4723// switch (a) {
4724// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4725// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4726// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4727// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4728// default:
4729// return 4;
4730// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004731static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4732 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4733 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004734 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004735 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004736 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4737 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4738 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4739 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4740 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4741 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4742
4743 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4744 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4745 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4746 Value *const ValueCompare =
4747 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4748 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4749 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4750 }
4751 Value *const ValueCompare =
4752 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004753 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4754 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004755 }
4756
4757 return nullptr;
4758}
4759
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004760// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4761// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004762static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4763 Value *SelectValue,
4764 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4765 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4766 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4767 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4768 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4769
4770 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4771
4772 // Remove the switch.
4773 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4774 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4775
4776 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4777 continue;
4778 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4779 }
4780 SI->eraseFromParent();
4781}
4782
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004783/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004784/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4785/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4786static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004787 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004788 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004789 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4790 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4791 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4792 Constant *DefaultResult;
4793 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4794 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004795 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004796 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004797 return false;
4798 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4799 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4800 return false;
4801 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4802
4803 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004804 Value *SelectValue =
4805 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004806 if (SelectValue) {
4807 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4808 return true;
4809 }
4810 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4811 return false;
4812}
4813
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004814namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004815
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004816/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4817class SwitchLookupTable {
4818public:
4819 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4820 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4821 SwitchLookupTable(
4822 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4823 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4824 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004825
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004826 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4827 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4828 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004829
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004830 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4831 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4832 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4833 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004834
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004835private:
4836 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4837 // different ways.
4838 enum {
4839 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4840 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4841 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004842
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004843 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4844 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4845 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4846 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004847
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004848 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4849 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4850 // shift and mask operations.
4851 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004852
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004853 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4854 // instructions from the table.
4855 ArrayKind
4856 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004857
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004858 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4859 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004860
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004861 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4862 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4863 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004864
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004865 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4866 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4867 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004868
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004869 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4870 GlobalVariable *Array;
4871};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004872
4873} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004874
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004875SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4876 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4877 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4878 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004879 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004880 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004881 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4882 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004883
4884 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004885 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004886
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004887 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4888
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004889 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004890 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004891 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4892 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4893 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004894 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004896 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004897 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4898
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004899 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004900 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004901 }
4902
4903 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004904 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004905 assert(DefaultValue &&
4906 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004907 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4909 if (!TableContents[I])
4910 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004911 }
4912
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004913 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004914 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004915 }
4916
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004917 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4918 // that single value.
4919 if (SingleValue) {
4920 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4921 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004922 }
4923
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004924 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4925 // table index.
4926 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4927 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4928 APInt PrevVal;
4929 APInt DistToPrev;
4930 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4931 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4932 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4933 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4934 if (!ConstVal) {
4935 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4936 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4937 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4938 break;
4939 }
4940 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4941 if (I != 0) {
4942 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4943 if (I == 1) {
4944 DistToPrev = Dist;
4945 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4946 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4947 break;
4948 }
4949 }
4950 PrevVal = Val;
4951 }
4952 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4953 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4954 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4955 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4956 ++NumLinearMaps;
4957 return;
4958 }
4959 }
4960
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004961 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004962 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004963 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004964 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4965 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4966 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004967 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4968 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4969 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4970 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4971 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004972 }
4973 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4974 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4975 Kind = BitMapKind;
4976 ++NumBitMaps;
4977 return;
4978 }
4979
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004980 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004981 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004982 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4983
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004984 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4985 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004986 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004987 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004988 Kind = ArrayKind;
4989}
4990
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004991Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004992 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004993 case SingleValueKind:
4994 return SingleValue;
4995 case LinearMapKind: {
4996 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4997 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4998 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4999 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5000 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5001 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5002 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5003 return Result;
5004 }
5005 case BitMapKind: {
5006 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5007 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005008
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005009 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5010 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5011 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5012 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005013
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005014 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5015 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5016 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5017 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005018
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005019 // Shift down.
5020 Value *DownShifted =
5021 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5022 // Mask off.
5023 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5024 }
5025 case ArrayKind: {
5026 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5027 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5028 uint64_t TableSize =
5029 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5030 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5031 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5032 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5033 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005034
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005035 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5036 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5037 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5038 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5039 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005040 }
5041 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5042}
5043
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005044bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005045 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005046 Type *ElementType) {
5047 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005048 if (!IT)
5049 return false;
5050 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5051 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005052
5053 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005054 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005055 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005056 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005057}
5058
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005059/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5060/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005061static bool
5062ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5063 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5064 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005065 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5066 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005067
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005068 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005069 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005070 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5071 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005072
5073 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005074 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005075
5076 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005077 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5078 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5079 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005080
5081 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5082 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5083 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5084 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005085 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005086 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005087
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005088 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5089 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5090 return true;
5091
5092 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5093 if (HasIllegalType)
5094 return false;
5095
5096 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5097 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5098 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5099 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005100}
5101
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005102/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5103/// \code
5104/// if (idx < tablesize)
5105/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5106/// else
5107/// r = default_value;
5108/// if (r != default_value)
5109/// ...
5110/// \endcode
5111/// Is optimized to:
5112/// \code
5113/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5114/// if (cond)
5115/// r = table[idx];
5116/// else
5117/// r = default_value;
5118/// if (cond)
5119/// ...
5120/// \endcode
5121/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005122static void reuseTableCompare(
5123 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5124 Constant *DefaultValue,
5125 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005126
5127 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5128 if (!CmpInst)
5129 return;
5130
5131 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5132 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5133 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5134 return;
5135
5136 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5137 if (!CmpOp1)
5138 return;
5139
5140 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5141 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5142 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5143
5144 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5145 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5146 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5147 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5148 return;
5149
5150 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5151 // compare result.
5152 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5153 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005154 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005155 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5156 return;
5157 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5158 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5159 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005160
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005161 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5162 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5163 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5164 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5165 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5166 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5167 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5168 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5169 return;
5170 }
5171
5172 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5173 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5174 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5175 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5176 } else {
5177 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005178 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5179 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5180 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005181 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5182 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5183 }
5184}
5185
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005186/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5187/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5188/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005189static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5190 const DataLayout &DL,
5191 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005192 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005193
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005194 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005195 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005196 return false;
5197
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005198 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5199 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5200
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005201 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5202 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5203 // string and lookup indices into that.
5204
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005205 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5206 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005207 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5208 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005209 return false;
5210
5211 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005212 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005213 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5214 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5215 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5216 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5217
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005218 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005219 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5220 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5221 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5222 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5223 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005224
5225 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5226 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5227 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5228 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5229 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5230 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5231
5232 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005233 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005234 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005235 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005236 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005237 return false;
5238
5239 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005240 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5241 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5242 Constant *Value = I.second;
5243 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5244 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5245 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005246 }
5247 }
5248
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005249 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005250 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005251 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5252 }
5253
5254 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5255 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5256 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5257 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5258
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005259 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5260 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005261 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005262 bool HasDefaultResults =
5263 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5264 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005265
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005266 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5267 if (NeedMask) {
5268 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005269 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005270 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005271 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005272 return false;
5273 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005274
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005275 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5276 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5277 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005278 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005279 }
5280
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005281 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005282 return false;
5283
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005284 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005285 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005286 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5287 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005288
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005289 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005290 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005291 Value *TableIndex =
5292 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005293
5294 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5295 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005296 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005297 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005298 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5299 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5300 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5301
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005302 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5303 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5304 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5305 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5306 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5307 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005308 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5309
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005310 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005311 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005312 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5313 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005314 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005315 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5316 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5317 RangeCheckBranch =
5318 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005319 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005320
5321 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5322 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005323
5324 if (NeedMask) {
5325 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5326 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5327 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5328 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5329 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005330 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5331 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005332
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005333 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5334 // unnecessary illegal types.
5335 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5336 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5337 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005338 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005339 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5340 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005341 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5342 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005343 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5344 }
5345 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5346
5347 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5348 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5349 // else continue with table lookup.
5350 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005351 Value *MaskIndex =
5352 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5353 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5354 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5355 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005356 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5357
5358 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5359 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5360 }
5361
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005362 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5363 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5364 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5365 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5366 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5367 }
5368
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005369 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005370 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5371 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005372 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005373
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005374 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5375 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005376 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005377
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005378 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005379
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005380 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5381 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005382 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5383 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005384 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5385 ReturnedEarly = true;
5386 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005387 }
5388
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005389 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5390 // possible.
5391 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5392 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5393 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5394 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5395 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5396 }
5397 }
5398
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005399 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005400 }
5401
5402 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5403 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5404
5405 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005406 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005407 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005408
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005409 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005410 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005411 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5412 }
5413 SI->eraseFromParent();
5414
5415 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005416 if (NeedMask)
5417 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005418 return true;
5419}
5420
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005421static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5422 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5423 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5424 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5425 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5426 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5427 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005428
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005429 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5430}
5431
5432// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5433// of cases.
5434//
5435// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5436// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5437//
5438// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5439// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5440static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5441 const DataLayout &DL,
5442 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5443 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5444 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5445 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5446 return false;
5447 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5448 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5449 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5450 return false;
5451
5452 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5453 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5454 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5455 // as signed.
5456 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5457 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5458 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5459 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5460
5461 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5462 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5463 return false;
5464
5465 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5466 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5467 for (auto &V : Values)
5468 V -= Base;
5469
5470 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5471 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5472 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5473 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5474 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005475 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005476
5477 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5478 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5479 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5480 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5481 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5482 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5483 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5484 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005485 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005486 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5487 return false;
5488
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005489 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005490 for (auto &V : Values)
5491 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5492
5493 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5494 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5495 return false;
5496
5497 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5498 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5499 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5500 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5501 //
5502 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5503 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5504 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5505 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005506
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005507 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5508 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5509 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5510 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005511 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5512 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5513 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005514 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5515
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005516 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5517 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005518 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5519 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005520 C.setValue(
5521 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005522 }
5523 return true;
5524}
5525
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005526bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005527 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5528
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005529 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5530 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5531 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5532 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5533 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005534 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005535
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005536 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5537 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5538 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005539 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005540
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005541 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5542 // away into any preds.
5543 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5544 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5545 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5546 ++BBI;
5547 if (SI == &*BBI)
5548 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005549 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005550 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005551
5552 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005553 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005554 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005555
5556 // Remove unreachable cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005557 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5558 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005559
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005560 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL, TTI))
5561 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005562
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005563 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005564 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005565
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005566 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005567 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005568
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005569 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005570 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005571
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005572 return false;
5573}
5574
5575bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5576 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5577 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005578
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005579 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5580 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5581 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5582 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005583 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005584 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5585 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005586 --i;
5587 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005588 Changed = true;
5589 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005590 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005591
5592 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5593 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5594 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5595 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5596 return true;
5597 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005598
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005599 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5600 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5601 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5602 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5603 return true;
5604 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005605
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005606 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5607 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005608 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005609 }
5610 return Changed;
5611}
5612
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005613/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5614/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5615/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5616/// a shared handler.
5617///
5618/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5619/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5620/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5621/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5622/// sinking in this file)
5623///
5624/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5625/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5626/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5627/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5628/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5629/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5630///
5631/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5632/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5633/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5634static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5635 BasicBlock *BB) {
5636 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5637 assert(Succ);
5638 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5639 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5640 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5641 return false;
5642
5643 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5644 if (BB == OtherPred)
5645 continue;
5646 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5647 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5648 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5649 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005650 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5651 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005652 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5653 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5654 continue;
5655
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005656 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005657 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5658 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5659 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5660 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5661 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005662 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5663 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005664 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5665 }
5666
5667 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5668 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005669 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5670 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5671 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005672 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5673 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5674 }
5675
5676 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5677 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5678 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5679 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5680 }
5681
5682 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5683 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5684 BI->eraseFromParent();
5685 return true;
5686 }
5687 return false;
5688}
5689
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005690bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5691 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005692 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005693
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005694 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5695 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005696
5697 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5698 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005699 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5700 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5701 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5702 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005703 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005704 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005705 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005706 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5707 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005708
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005709 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5710 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5711 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5712 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5713 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5714 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005715 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005716 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005717 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005718 return true;
5719 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005720
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005721 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5722 // equivalent.
5723 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005724 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5725 }
5726 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005727 return true;
5728 }
5729
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005730 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5731 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5732 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5733 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005734 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005735 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005736 return false;
5737}
5738
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005739static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5740 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5741 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5742 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5743 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5744 return nullptr;
5745 PredPred = PPred;
5746 }
5747 return PredPred;
5748}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005750bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005751 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005752
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005753 // Conditional branch
5754 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5755 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5756 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5757 // switch.
5758 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005759 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005760 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005761
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005762 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5763 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5764 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5765 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5766 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5767 ++I;
5768 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005769 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005770 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005771 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005772 ++I;
5773 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5774 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5775 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005776 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005777 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005778 }
5779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005780
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005781 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005782 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005783 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005784
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005785 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5786 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5787 // of the BI branch.
5788 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5789 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5790 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5791 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5792 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5793 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5794 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5795 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5796 if (Implication) {
5797 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5798 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5799 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5800 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5801 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5802 BI->setCondition(CI);
5803 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005804 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005805 }
5806 }
5807 }
5808
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005809 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5810 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5811 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005812 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005813 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005814
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005815 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5816 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5817 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5818 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005819 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5820 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005821 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005822 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005823 } else {
5824 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005825 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005826 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5827 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5828 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005829 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005830 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005831 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005832 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005833 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005834 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005835 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5836 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5837 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005838 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005839 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005840 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005841
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005842 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5843 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5844 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5845 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00005846 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005847 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005848
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005849 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005850 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5851 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005852 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005853 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005854 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005855
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005856 // Look for diamond patterns.
5857 if (MergeCondStores)
5858 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5859 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5860 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5861 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005862 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005863
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005864 return false;
5865}
5866
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005867/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5868static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5869 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5870 if (!C)
5871 return false;
5872
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005873 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005874 return false;
5875
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005876 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005877 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005878 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005879
5880 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5881 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005882 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5883 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5884 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5885 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005886 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005887 return false;
5888
5889 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5890 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5891 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5892 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5893
5894 // Look through bitcasts.
5895 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5896 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5897
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005898 // Load from null is undefined.
5899 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005900 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5901 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005902
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005903 // Store to null is undefined.
5904 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005905 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005906 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5907 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005908
5909 // A call to null is undefined.
5910 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5911 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005912 }
5913 return false;
5914}
5915
5916/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005917/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005918static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5919 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5920 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5921 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5922 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5923 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5924 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5925 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5926 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5927 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5928 // destination from conditional branches.
5929 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5930 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5931 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005932 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5933 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005934 BI->eraseFromParent();
5935 return true;
5936 }
5937 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5938 }
5939
5940 return false;
5941}
5942
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005943bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005944 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005945
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005946 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005947 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005948
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005949 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5950 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005951 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005952 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005953 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5954 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5955 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005956 }
5957
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005958 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5959 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005960 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005961
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005962 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5963 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5964
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005965 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5966 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5967
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005968 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5969 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5970 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5971 //
5972 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5973 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005974
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005975 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5976
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005977 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5978 // eliminate it, do so now.
5979 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5980 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005981 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005982
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005983 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005984 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005985 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005986 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5987 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005988 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005989 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5990 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005991 }
5992 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005993 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5994 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005995 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005996 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5997 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005998 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005999 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6000 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6001 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006002 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006003 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6004 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006005 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006006 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6007 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6008 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006009 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006010 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6011 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6012 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006013 }
6014
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006015 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006016}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006017
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00006018/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
6019/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006020/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
6021/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
6022///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00006023bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006024 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00006025 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006026 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006027 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006028 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006029}